blob: ab281ef1edb8e78be37827d21959265eeb0a4d7c [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
14#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000015#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
16#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000026#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000027#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000028#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000039#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000041#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000043#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000044#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
45#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000048#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000049#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000050#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000051using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000052using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000053
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000054#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
55
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000056// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
57// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
58// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
59// minimum reasonable default.
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000060static cl::opt<unsigned>
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000061PHINodeFoldingThreshold("phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
62 cl::desc("Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000063
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000064static cl::opt<bool>
65DupRet("simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
66 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
67
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000068static cl::opt<bool>
69SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
70 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
71
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000072static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
73 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
74 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000075
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000076static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
77 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
78 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
79 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
80 "predicated store"));
81
82static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
83 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
84 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
85 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
86
Sanjay Patel38a02262015-12-15 17:38:29 +000087static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
88 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
89 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
90 "executed"));
91
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000092STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +000093STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000094STATISTIC(NumLookupTables, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +000095STATISTIC(NumLookupTablesHoles, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +000096STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000097STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons, "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000098STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +000099
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000100namespace {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000101 // The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
Sanjay Patel9361d352015-09-10 16:31:19 +0000102 // case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
103 // cases composing the case group.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000104 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
105 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
106 // The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
Sanjay Patel9361d352015-09-10 16:31:19 +0000107 // and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
108 // switch for that PHI.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000109 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
110
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000111 /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
112 struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
113 ConstantInt *Value;
114 BasicBlock *Dest;
115
116 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
117 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
118
119 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
120 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
121 return Value < RHS.Value;
122 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000123
124 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000125 };
126
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000127class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000128 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000129 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000130 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000131 AssumptionCache *AC;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000132 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
133 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000134 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000135 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000136 BasicBlock *Pred,
137 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000138 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
139 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000140
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000141 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000142 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000143 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000144 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000145 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000146 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000147 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <> &Builder);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000148 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <>&Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000149
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000150public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000151 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
152 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC)
153 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000154 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
155};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000156}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000157
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000158/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000159/// terminator instructions together.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000160static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
161 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000162
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000163 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
164 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
165 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
166 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
167 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Chris Lattnerb7b75142007-04-02 01:44:59 +0000168 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000169
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000170 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
171 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
172 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000173 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
174 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
175 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
176 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
177 return false;
178 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000179
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000180 return true;
181}
182
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000183/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
184/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
185/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000186static bool isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1,
187 BranchInst *SI2,
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000188 Instruction *Cond,
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000189 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode*> &PhiNodes) {
190 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
191 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
192
193 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000194 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000195 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
196 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
197 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
198 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
199 if (!Ci2) return false;
200 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
201 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
202 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
203 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
204 return false;
205
206 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
207 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
208 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000209 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
210 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
211 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000212 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
213 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
214 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000215 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000216 return false;
217 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
218 }
219 return true;
220}
221
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000222/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
223/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
224/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
225/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000226static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
227 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000228 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin())) return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000229
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000230 PHINode *PN;
231 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
232 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
233 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000234}
235
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000236/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
237/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
238/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000239/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000240static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000241 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000242 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000243 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000244 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000245}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000246
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000247/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
248/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000249/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
250/// which works well enough for us.
251///
252/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000253/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
254/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
255/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
256/// set and true is returned.
257///
258/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
259/// Select whose cost is 2.
260///
261/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
262/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
263/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000264static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Craig Topper71b7b682014-08-21 05:55:13 +0000265 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction*> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000266 unsigned &CostRemaining,
Sanjay Patel38a02262015-12-15 17:38:29 +0000267 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
268 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000269 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000270 if (!I) {
271 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
272 // can be executed unconditionally.
273 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
274 if (C->canTrap())
275 return false;
276 return true;
277 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000278 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000279
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000280 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000281 // the bottom of this block.
282 if (PBB == BB) return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000283
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000284 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
285 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000286 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
287 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000288 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000289 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000290
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000291 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
292 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000293 if (!AggressiveInsts) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000294
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000295 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
296 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I)) return true;
297
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000298 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
299 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
300 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000301 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000302 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000303
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000304 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000305
Sanjay Patel38a02262015-12-15 17:38:29 +0000306 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
307 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
308 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
309 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
310 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
311 // enabled further IR optimizations.
312 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
313 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000314 return false;
315
Sanjay Patel38a02262015-12-15 17:38:29 +0000316 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
317 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000318
319 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
320 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000321 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
Sanjay Patel38a02262015-12-15 17:38:29 +0000322 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
323 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000324 return false;
325 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
326 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000327 return true;
328}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000329
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000330/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000331/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000332static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000333 // Normal constant int.
334 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000335 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000336 return CI;
337
338 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
339 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000340 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000341
342 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
343 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
344 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
345
346 // IntToPtr const int.
347 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
348 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
349 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
350 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
351 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
352 return CI;
353 else
354 return cast<ConstantInt>
355 (ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
356 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000357 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000358}
359
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000360namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000361
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000362/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
363/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
364/// structure.
365/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
366/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
367/// representing the different cases for the switch.
368/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
369/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
370/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
371/// fail.
372struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000373 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000374 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
375 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
376 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
377 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000378
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000379 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000380 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
381 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
382 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000383 }
384
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000385 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000386 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000387 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000388 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000389
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000390private:
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000391
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000392 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
393 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
394 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
395 if(CompValue && CompValue != NewVal) return false;
396 CompValue = NewVal;
397 return (CompValue != nullptr);
398 }
399
400 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
401 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
402 /// match depending on isEQ).
403 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
404 /// against is placed in CompValue.
405 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
406 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000407 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000408 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
409 ICmpInst *ICI;
410 ConstantInt *C;
411 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
412 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
413 return false;
414 }
415
416 Value *RHSVal;
417 ConstantInt *RHSC;
418
419 // Pattern match a special case
420 // (x & ~2^x) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^x
421 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
422 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ:ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
423 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
424 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
425 APInt Not = ~RHSC->getValue();
426 if (Not.isPowerOf2()) {
427 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
428 if(!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
429 return false;
430
431 Vals.push_back(C);
432 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
433 C->getValue() | Not));
434 UsedICmps++;
435 return true;
436 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000437 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000438
439 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
440 if(!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
441 return false;
442
443 UsedICmps++;
444 Vals.push_back(C);
445 return ICI->getOperand(0);
446 }
447
448 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000449 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
450 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000451
452 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
453 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
454 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
455 if(match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
456 Span = Span.subtract(RHSC->getValue());
457 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
458 }
459
460 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
461 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
462 // x != 0 && x != 1.
463 if (!isEQ)
464 Span = Span.inverse();
465
466 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
467 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
468 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000469 }
470
471 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000472 if(!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
473 return false;
474
475 // Add all values from the range to the set
476 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
477 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000478
479 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000480 return true;
481
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000482 }
483
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000484 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000485 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
486 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
487 /// vector.
488 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000489 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000490 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
491 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000492
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000493 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
494 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000495
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000496 // Initialize
497 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000498
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000499 while(!DFT.empty()) {
500 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000501
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000502 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
503 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
504 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
505 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
506 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
507 continue;
508 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000509
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000510 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000511 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000512 // Match succeed, continue the loop
513 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000514 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000515
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000516 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
517 // comparison against the same value as the others.
518 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
519 if (!Extra) {
520 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000521 continue;
522 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000523 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
524 CompValue = nullptr;
525 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000526 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000527 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000528};
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000529
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000530}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000531
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000532static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000533 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000534 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
535 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
536 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
537 if (BI->isConditional())
538 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000539 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
540 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000541 }
542
543 TI->eraseFromParent();
544 if (Cond) RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
545}
546
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000547/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000548/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000549Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000550 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000551 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
552 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
553 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000554 if (SI->getNumSuccessors()*std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
555 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <= 128)
556 CV = SI->getCondition();
557 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000558 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000559 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000560 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000561 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000562 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000563
564 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000565 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000566 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
567 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000568 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000569 CV = Ptr;
570 }
571 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000572 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000573}
574
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000575/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000576/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000577BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000578GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000579 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase>
580 &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000581 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000582 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
583 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e; ++i)
584 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(),
585 i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000586 return SI->getDefaultDest();
587 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000588
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000589 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000590 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000591 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
592 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1),
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000593 DL),
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000594 Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000595 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000596}
597
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000598
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000599/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000600/// in the list that match the specified block.
601static void EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
602 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000603 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000604}
605
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000606/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000607static bool
608ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
609 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase > &C2) {
610 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
611
612 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
613 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
614 std::swap(V1, V2);
615
616 if (V1->size() == 0) return false;
617 if (V1->size() == 1) {
618 // Just scan V2.
619 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
620 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
621 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
622 return true;
623 }
624
625 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
626 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
627 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
628 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
629 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
630 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
631 return true;
632 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
633 ++i1;
634 else
635 ++i2;
636 }
637 return false;
638}
639
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000640/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
641/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
642/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
643/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
644/// very limited form of jump threading.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000645bool SimplifyCFGOpt::
646SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000647 BasicBlock *Pred,
648 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000649 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
650 if (!PredVal) return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
651
652 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
653 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
654 if (ThisVal != PredVal) return false; // Different predicates.
655
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000656 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
657 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
658
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000659 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000660 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000661 BasicBlock *PredDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(),
662 PredCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000663 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000664
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000665 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000666 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000667 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000668 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000669
670 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
671 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
672 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
673 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
674 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
675 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000676 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000677 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000678
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000679 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
680 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
681 // uncond br.
682 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
683 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000684 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000685 (void) NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000686
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000687 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000688 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000689
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000690 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
691 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000692
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000693 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
694 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000695 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000696
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000697 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
698 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000699 SmallPtrSet<Constant*, 16> DeadCases;
700 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
701 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000702
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000703 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000704 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000705
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000706 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
707 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000708 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000709 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
710 if (HasWeight)
711 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
712 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000713 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000714 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
715 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000716 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
717 --i;
718 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000719 if (HasWeight) {
720 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
721 Weights.pop_back();
722 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000723 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
724 SI->removeCase(i);
725 }
726 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000727 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000728 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
729 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
730 createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000731
732 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000733 return true;
734 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000735
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000736 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
737 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000738 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000739 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000740 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
741 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000742 if (TIV)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000743 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
744 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
745 }
746 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000747
748 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
749 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000750 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000751 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
752 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
753 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
754 break;
755 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000756
757 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000758 if (!TheRealDest) TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000759
760 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
761 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000762 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(TIBB), e = succ_end(TIBB); SI != e; ++SI)
763 if (*SI != CheckEdge)
764 (*SI)->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000765 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000766 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000767
768 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000769 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000770 (void) NI;
771
772 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
773 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
774
775 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
776 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000777}
778
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000779namespace {
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000780 /// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000781 /// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
782 /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
783 struct ConstantIntOrdering {
784 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
785 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
786 }
787 };
788}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000789
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000790static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
791 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
792 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
793 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000794 if (LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()))
795 return 1;
796 if (LHS->getValue() == RHS->getValue())
797 return 0;
798 return -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000799}
800
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000801static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction* I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000802 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000803 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
804 if (MDString* MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
805 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
806
807 return false;
808}
809
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000810/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
811/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
812/// metadata.
813static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
814 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000815 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000816 assert(MD);
817 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000818 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000819 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000820 }
821
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000822 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
823 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
824 // default weight to be the first entry.
825 if (BranchInst* BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
826 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
827 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
828 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
829 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000830 }
831}
832
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000833/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000834static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000835 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
836 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
837 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
838 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
839 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000840 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000841}
842
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000843/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
844/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000845/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
846/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000847bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
848 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000849 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
850 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
851 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
852 bool Changed = false;
853
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000854 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000855 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000856 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000857
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000858 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
859 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
860 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
861
862 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
863 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000864 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000865 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
866
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000867 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000868 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
869
870 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
871 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
872 // build.
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000873 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000874
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000875 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
876 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000877 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
878 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
879
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000880 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000881 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000882 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000883 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
884 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
885 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000886 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
887 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
888 // successor's weights
889 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000890
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000891 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000892 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000893 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000894 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000895 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
896 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
897 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000898 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000899
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000900 if (PredDefault == BB) {
901 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
902 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000903 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
904 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
905 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
906 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
907 else {
908 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
909 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000910
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000911 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
912 // Increase weight for the default case.
913 Weights[0] += Weights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000914 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
915 Weights.pop_back();
916 }
917
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000918 PredCases.pop_back();
919 --i; --e;
920 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000921
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000922 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000923 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
924 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
925 PredDefault = BBDefault;
926 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
927 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000928
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000929 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
930 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000931 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
932 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
933 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
934 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
935 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000936 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
937 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
938 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
939 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
940 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i+1]);
941 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000942 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000943 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000944
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000945 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
946 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
947 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
948 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
949 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
950 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
951 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
952 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000953 } else {
954 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
955 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
956 // activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000957 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000958 std::map<ConstantInt*, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000959 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
960 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
961 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000962
963 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
964 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i+1];
965 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
966 Weights.pop_back();
967 }
968
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000969 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
970 PredCases.pop_back();
971 --i; --e;
972 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000973
974 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
975 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000976 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
977 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
978 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000979 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
980 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000981 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
982 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
983 PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value);// This constant is taken care of
984 }
985
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000986 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
987 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000988 for (std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator I =
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000989 PTIHandled.begin(),
990 E = PTIHandled.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000991 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
992 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000993 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000994 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000995 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000996 }
997
998 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
999 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1000 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001001 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1002 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001003
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001004 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001005 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001006 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001007 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001008 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001009 }
1010
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001011 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001012 SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault,
1013 PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001014 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001015 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1016 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001017
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001018 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1019 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1020 FitWeights(Weights);
1021
1022 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1023
1024 NewSI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1025 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).
1026 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
1027 }
1028
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001029 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001030
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001031 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1032 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1033 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001034 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001035 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1036 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001037 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001038 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001039 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00001040 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1041 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001042 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001043 }
1044 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1045 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001046
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001047 Changed = true;
1048 }
1049 }
1050 return Changed;
1051}
1052
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001053// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1054// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1055// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001056static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1057 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001058 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001059 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001060 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001061 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1062 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1063 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1064 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V==I1 || BB2V==I2)) {
1065 return false;
1066 }
1067 }
1068 }
1069 return true;
1070}
1071
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001072static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1073
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001074/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1075/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1076/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001077static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001078 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001079 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1080 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1081 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1082 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1083 // identical order.
1084 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1085 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
1086
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001087 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1088 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1089
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001090 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001091 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1092 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1093 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1094 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1095 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001096 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001097 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001098 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001099 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001100 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001101 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001102 return false;
1103
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001104 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001105
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001106 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001107 do {
1108 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1109 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1110 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1111 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001112
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001113 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1114 return Changed;
1115
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001116 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1117 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1118 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001119 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001120 if (!I2->use_empty())
1121 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001122 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001123 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {
Piotr Padlewskidc9b2cf2015-10-02 22:12:22 +00001124 LLVMContext::MD_tbaa, LLVMContext::MD_range,
1125 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath, LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
Artur Pilipenko5c5011d2015-11-02 17:53:51 +00001126 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull, LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1127 LLVMContext::MD_align, LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1128 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001129 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001130 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001131 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001132
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001133 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1134 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001135 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1136 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1137 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1138 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1139 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001140 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001141 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001142 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001143 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001144 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001145
1146 return true;
1147
1148HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001149 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1150 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001151 return Changed;
1152
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001153 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001154 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001155 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001156 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1157 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1158 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1159 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1160 continue;
1161
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001162 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1163 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1164 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1165 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
1166 return Changed;
1167
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001168 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001169 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001170 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001171 return Changed;
1172 }
1173 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001174
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001175 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001176 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001177 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001178 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001179 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1180 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001181 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001182 }
1183
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001184 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001185 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1186 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1187 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1188 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
1189 std::map<std::pair<Value*,Value*>, SelectInst*> InsertedSelects;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001190 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001191 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001192 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001193 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001194 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1195 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001196 if (BB1V == BB2V) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001197
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001198 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1199 // that determines the right value.
1200 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001201 if (!SI)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001202 SI = cast<SelectInst>
1203 (Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1204 BB1V->getName()+"."+BB2V->getName()));
1205
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001206 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1207 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1208 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1209 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001210 }
1211 }
1212
1213 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001214 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI)
1215 AddPredecessorToBlock(*SI, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001216
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001217 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001218 return true;
1219}
1220
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001221/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001222/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1223/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1224/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1225static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1226 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
1227 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent();
1228 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1229
1230 // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with
1231 // an unconditional branch.
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001232 pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd);
1233 BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++;
1234 if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001235 return false;
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001236 BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++;
1237 if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors.
1238 return false;
1239 BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001240 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator());
1241 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional())
1242 return false;
1243
1244 // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001245 SmallDenseMap<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, PHINode *> JointValueMap;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001246 Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001247 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end(); I != E; ++I) {
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001248 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
1249 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001250 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001251 JointValueMap[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)] = PN;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001252 } else {
1253 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I;
1254 break;
1255 }
1256 }
1257 if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd)
1258 return false;
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001259
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001260 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1261 // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical
1262 // instructions in an identical order.
1263 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(),
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001264 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(),
1265 RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(),
1266 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001267 // Skip debug info.
1268 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1269 if (RI1 == RE1)
1270 return false;
1271 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1272 if (RI2 == RE2)
1273 return false;
1274 // Skip the unconditional branches.
1275 ++RI1;
1276 ++RI2;
1277
1278 bool Changed = false;
1279 while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) {
1280 // Skip debug info.
1281 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1282 if (RI1 == RE1)
1283 return Changed;
1284 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1285 if (RI2 == RE2)
1286 return Changed;
1287
1288 Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001289 auto InstPair = std::make_pair(I1, I2);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001290 // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they
1291 // perform the same operation.
1292 // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc.
1293 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) ||
1294 isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) ||
David Majnemerba275f92015-08-19 19:54:02 +00001295 I1->isEHPad() || I2->isEHPad() ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001296 isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) ||
1297 I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() ||
1298 I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() ||
1299 !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() ||
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001300 !JointValueMap.count(InstPair))
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001301 return Changed;
1302
1303 // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001304 // TODO: Add support of communativity.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001305 ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2);
1306 bool SwapOpnds = false;
1307 if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 &&
1308 ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) &&
1309 ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) &&
1310 (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) ||
1311 ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) {
1312 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1313 SwapOpnds = true;
1314 }
1315 if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) {
1316 if (SwapOpnds)
1317 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1318 return Changed;
1319 }
1320
1321 // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated
1322 // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is
1323 // a single pair of different operands.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001324 Value *DifferentOp1 = nullptr, *DifferentOp2 = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001325 unsigned Op1Idx = ~0U;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001326 for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) {
1327 if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I))
1328 continue;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001329 // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or if
1330 // we need a PHI node to replace a constant.
1331 if (Op1Idx != ~0U ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001332 isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) ||
1333 isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) {
1334 // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping.
1335 if (SwapOpnds)
1336 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1337 return Changed;
1338 }
1339 DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I);
1340 Op1Idx = I;
1341 DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I);
1342 }
1343
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001344 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n");
1345 DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n");
1346
1347 // We insert the pair of different operands to JointValueMap and
1348 // remove (I1, I2) from JointValueMap.
1349 if (Op1Idx != ~0U) {
1350 auto &NewPN = JointValueMap[std::make_pair(DifferentOp1, DifferentOp2)];
1351 if (!NewPN) {
1352 NewPN =
1353 PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001354 DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001355 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1);
1356 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2);
1357 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";);
1358 }
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001359 // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1.
1360 I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001361 }
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001362 PHINode *OldPN = JointValueMap[InstPair];
1363 JointValueMap.erase(InstPair);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001364
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001365 // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first
1366 // instruction in the basic block down.
1367 bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == BB1->begin()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == BB2->begin());
1368 // Sink the instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001369 BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd->getIterator(),
1370 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001371 if (!OldPN->use_empty())
1372 OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1373 OldPN->eraseFromParent();
1374
1375 if (!I2->use_empty())
1376 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1377 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Philip Reamesd92c2a72014-10-22 16:37:13 +00001378 // TODO: Use combineMetadata here to preserve what metadata we can
1379 // (analogous to the hoisting case above).
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001380 I2->eraseFromParent();
1381
1382 if (UpdateRE1)
1383 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend();
1384 if (UpdateRE2)
1385 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001386 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I1;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001387 NumSinkCommons++;
1388 Changed = true;
1389 }
1390 return Changed;
1391}
1392
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001393/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1394/// conditional block.
1395///
1396/// We are looking for code like the following:
1397/// BrBB:
1398/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1399/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1400/// ... // function).
1401/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1402/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1403/// ThenBB:
1404/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1405/// br label EndBB
1406/// EndBB:
1407/// ...
1408/// We are going to transform this into:
1409/// BrBB:
1410/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1411/// ... //
1412/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1413/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1414/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1415/// ...
1416///
1417/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1418/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001419static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1420 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001421 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1422 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001423 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001424
1425 // Volatile or atomic.
1426 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001427 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001428
1429 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1430
1431 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
1432 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 10;
1433 for (BasicBlock::reverse_iterator RI = BrBB->rbegin(),
1434 RE = BrBB->rend(); RI != RE && (--MaxNumInstToLookAt); ++RI) {
1435 Instruction *CurI = &*RI;
1436
1437 // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free().
1438 if (CurI->mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001439 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001440
1441 StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI);
1442 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1443 if (SI && SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1444 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1445 return SI->getValueOperand();
1446 else if (SI)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001447 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001448 }
1449
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001450 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001451}
1452
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001453/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001454///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001455/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1456/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1457/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1458/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1459/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1460///
1461/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1462/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1463/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1464/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1465///
1466///
1467/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1468/// \code
1469/// BB:
1470/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1471/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1472/// ThenBB:
1473/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001474/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001475/// EndBB:
1476/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1477/// ...
1478/// \endcode
1479///
1480/// Into this IR:
1481/// \code
1482/// BB:
1483/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1484/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1485/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1486/// ...
1487/// \endcode
1488///
1489/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001490static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001491 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001492 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1493 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1494 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1495 return false;
1496
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001497 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1498 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1499
1500 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1501 // to swap the select operands later.
1502 bool Invert = false;
1503 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1504 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1505 Invert = true;
1506 }
1507 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1508
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001509 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1510 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1511 // - They are defined in BB, and
1512 // - They have no side effects, and
1513 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1514 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1515
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001516 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001517 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1518 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001519 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001520 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001521 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001522 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001523 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001524 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1525 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001526
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001527 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001528 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001529 ++SpeculationCost;
1530 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001531 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001532
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001533 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001534 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1535 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1536 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001537 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001538 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001539 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1540 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001541 return false;
1542
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001543 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1544 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1545 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1546
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001547 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001548 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001549 // being sunk into the use block.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001550 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001551 i != e; ++i) {
1552 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001553 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB ||
1554 OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
1555 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1556
1557 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001558 }
1559 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001560
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001561 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1562 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1563 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
1564 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator I =
1565 SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(), E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
1566 I != E; ++I)
1567 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001568 ++SpeculationCost;
1569 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001570 return false;
1571 }
1572
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001573 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1574 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001575 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001576 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001577 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1578 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001579
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001580 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001581 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001582 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001583 continue;
1584
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001585 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1586 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1587 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1588 return false;
1589
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001590 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001591 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1592 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1593 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001594 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1595
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001596 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1597 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001598 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001599 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1600 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001601 unsigned MaxCost = 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold *
1602 TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1603 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001604 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001605
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001606 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1607 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1608 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001609 // constant expression.
1610 ++SpeculationCost;
1611 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001612 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001613 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001614
1615 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1616 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001617 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001618 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001619
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001620 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001621 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001622
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001623 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1624 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
1625 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
1626 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1627 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1628 if (Invert)
1629 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1630 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() +
1631 "." + FalseV->getName());
1632 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1633 }
1634
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001635 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
1636 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
1637 for (auto &I: *ThenBB)
1638 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
1639
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001640 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001641 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
1642 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001643
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001644 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001645 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001646 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1647 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1648 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1649 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1650 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1651 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1652
1653 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1654 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1655 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001656
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001657 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001658 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1659 // destinations were inverted.
1660 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001661 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001662 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1663 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV,
1664 TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName());
1665 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1666 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001667 }
1668
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001669 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001670 return true;
1671}
1672
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001673/// \returns True if this block contains a CallInst with the NoDuplicate
1674/// attribute.
1675static bool HasNoDuplicateCall(const BasicBlock *BB) {
1676 for (BasicBlock::const_iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I) {
1677 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I);
1678 if (!CI)
1679 continue;
1680 if (CI->cannotDuplicate())
1681 return true;
1682 }
1683 return false;
1684}
1685
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001686/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001687static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1688 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001689 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001690
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001691 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001692 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1693 continue;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001694 if (Size > 10) return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001695 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001696
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001697 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001698 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001699 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1700 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
1701 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI)) return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001702 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001703
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001704 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1705 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001706
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001707 return true;
1708}
1709
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001710/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
1711/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
1712/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001713static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001714 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1715 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001716 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1717 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001718 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1719 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001720
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001721 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1722 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001723 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001724 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001725 }
1726
1727 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001728 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001729
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001730 if (HasNoDuplicateCall(BB)) return false;
1731
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001732 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1733 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001734 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001735 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001736 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001737
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001738 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1739 // branch to RealDest.
1740 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1741 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001742
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001743 if (RealDest == BB) continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001744 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
1745 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator())) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001746
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001747 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1748 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1749 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1750 // the edge we are about to create.
1751 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1752 RealDest->getName()+".critedge",
1753 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
1754 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001755
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001756 // Update PHI nodes.
1757 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001758
1759 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1760 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1761 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1762 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
1763 DenseMap<Value*, Value*> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
1764 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1765 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1766 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1767 continue;
1768 }
1769 // Clone the instruction.
1770 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
1771 if (BBI->hasName()) N->setName(BBI->getName()+".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001772
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001773 // Update operands due to translation.
1774 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end();
1775 i != e; ++i) {
1776 DenseMap<Value*, Value*>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
1777 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1778 *i = PI->second;
1779 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001780
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001781 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001782 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001783 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001784 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001785 } else {
1786 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1787 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
1788 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001789 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001790 }
1791 }
1792
1793 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1794 // to EdgeBB instead.
1795 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1796 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1797 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1798 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1799 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1800 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001801
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001802 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001803 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001804 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001805
1806 return false;
1807}
1808
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001809/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
1810/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001811static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
1812 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001813 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
1814 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
1815 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
1816 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
1817 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
1818 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001819 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
1820 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
1821 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001822 if (!IfCond ||
1823 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
1824 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
1825 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001826
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00001827 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
1828 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
1829 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
1830 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
1831 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
1832 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
1833 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
1834 if (NumPhis > 2)
1835 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001836
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001837 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
1838 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
1839 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001840 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00001841 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
1842 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001843 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1844 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001845
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001846 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
1847 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001848 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001849 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001850 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001851 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001852 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001853
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001854 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001855 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001856 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001857 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001858 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001859 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001860
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00001861 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001862 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
1863 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001864 if (!PN) return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001865
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001866 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
1867 // often be turned into switches and other things.
1868 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
1869 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
1870 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
1871 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
1872 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001873
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001874 // If we all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all
1875 // instructions in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If
1876 // not, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so it's not
1877 // worth promoting to select instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001878 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001879 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
1880 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
1881 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001882 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001883 } else {
1884 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
1885 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001886 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001887 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1888 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1889 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1890 return false;
1891 }
1892 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001893
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001894 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001895 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001896 } else {
1897 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
1898 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001899 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001900 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1901 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1902 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1903 return false;
1904 }
1905 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001906
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00001907 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001908 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001909
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001910 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
1911 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001912 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001913 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001914
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001915 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
1916 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001917 if (IfBlock1)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001918 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001919 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001920 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001921 if (IfBlock2)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001922 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001923 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001924 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001925
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001926 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
1927 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001928 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
1929 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001930
1931 SelectInst *NV =
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001932 cast<SelectInst>(Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, ""));
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001933 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(NV);
1934 NV->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001935 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001936 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001937
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001938 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
1939 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
1940 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
1941 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001942 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
1943 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001944 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001945 return true;
1946}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001947
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001948/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
1949/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001950/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001951static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001952 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001953 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
1954 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
1955 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
1956 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
1957 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001958
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001959 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
1960 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
1961 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001962 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001963 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001964 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001965 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001966
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001967 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001968 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
1969 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
1970 // branch into a return.
1971 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
1972 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1973 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001974 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001975 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001976 return true;
1977 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001978
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001979 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
1980 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
1981 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
1982 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001983
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001984 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
1985 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
1986 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
1987 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
1988 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
1989 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
1990 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001991
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001992 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
1993 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
1994 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
1995 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
1996 // safe.
1997 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
1998 if (TCV->canTrap())
1999 return false;
2000 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2001 if (FCV->canTrap())
2002 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002003
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002004 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2005 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2006 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2007 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002008
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002009 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2010 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002011 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002012 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002013 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2014 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2015 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2016 } else {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002017 TrueValue = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue,
2018 FalseValue, "retval");
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002019 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002020 }
2021
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002022 Value *RI = !TrueValue ?
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002023 Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
2024
Daniel Dunbar5e0a58b2009-08-23 10:29:55 +00002025 (void) RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002026
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002027 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002028 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
2029 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: "<< *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002030
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002031 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2032
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002033 return true;
2034}
2035
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002036/// Given a conditional BranchInstruction, retrieve the probabilities of the
2037/// branch taking each edge. Fills in the two APInt parameters and returns true,
2038/// or returns false if no or invalid metadata was found.
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002039static bool ExtractBranchMetadata(BranchInst *BI,
2040 uint64_t &ProbTrue, uint64_t &ProbFalse) {
2041 assert(BI->isConditional() &&
2042 "Looking for probabilities on unconditional branch?");
2043 MDNode *ProfileData = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
2044 if (!ProfileData || ProfileData->getNumOperands() != 3) return false;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +00002045 ConstantInt *CITrue =
2046 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(1));
2047 ConstantInt *CIFalse =
2048 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(2));
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002049 if (!CITrue || !CIFalse) return false;
2050 ProbTrue = CITrue->getValue().getZExtValue();
2051 ProbFalse = CIFalse->getValue().getZExtValue();
2052 return true;
2053}
2054
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002055/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002056/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002057static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002058 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2059 return false;
2060 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) {
2061 Instruction *PBI = &*I;
2062 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2063 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2064 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2065 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2066 return true;
2067 }
2068 }
2069 return false;
2070}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002071
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002072/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2073/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2074/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002075bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002076 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002077
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002078 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002079 if (BI->isConditional())
2080 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2081 else {
2082 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2083 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2084 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2085 // predecessor.
2086 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2087 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2088 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2089 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2090 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
2091 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end();
2092 I != E; ) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002093 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002094 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2095 Cond = Curr;
2096 break;
2097 }
2098 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2099 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2100 return false;
2101 }
2102 }
2103
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002104 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002105 return false;
2106 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002107
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002108 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2109 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002110 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002111
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002112 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002113 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002114
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002115 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002116 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt)) ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002117
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002118 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002119 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002120
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002121 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2122 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2123 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2124 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2125 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2126 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
2127 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != I; ++I) {
2128 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2129 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2130 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002131 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002132 return false;
2133 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2134 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2135 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2136 return false;
2137 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2138 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2139 // and Cond.
2140 ++NumBonusInsts;
2141 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2142 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2143 return false;
2144 }
2145
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002146 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2147 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2148 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2149 if (CE->canTrap())
2150 return false;
2151 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2152 if (CE->canTrap())
2153 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002154
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002155 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
2156 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002157 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002158 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2159 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002160
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002161 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2162 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002163 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002164
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002165 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2166 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2167 // blocks.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002168 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002169 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002170 (BI->isConditional() &&
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002171 !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
2172 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2173 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002174 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002175
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002176 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002177 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002178 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002179
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002180 if (BI->isConditional()) {
2181 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest)
2182 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2183 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest)
2184 Opc = Instruction::And;
2185 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest)
2186 Opc = Instruction::And, InvertPredCond = true;
2187 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest)
2188 Opc = Instruction::Or, InvertPredCond = true;
2189 else
2190 continue;
2191 } else {
2192 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2193 continue;
2194 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002195
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002196 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002197 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002198
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002199 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2200 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002201 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002202
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002203 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2204 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2205 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2206 } else {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002207 NewCond = Builder.CreateNot(NewCond,
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002208 PBI->getCondition()->getName()+".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002209 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002210
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002211 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002212 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002213 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002214
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002215 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002216 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002217 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2218 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2219 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002220 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002221 // instructions.
2222 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
2223 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2224 continue;
2225 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2226 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
2227 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002228 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002229
2230 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2231 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2232 // only given the branch precondition.
2233 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2234 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002235 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002236
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002237 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2238 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002239 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002240 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002241
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002242 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2243 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002244 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002245 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
2246 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002247 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002248 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002249 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002250
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002251 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002252 Instruction *NewCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002253 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(),
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002254 New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002255 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2256
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002257 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002258 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2259 PredFalseWeight);
2260 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2261 SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002262 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2263
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002264 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002265 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2266 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2267 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2268 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2269 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2270 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2271 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2272 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2273 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
2274 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2275 SuccTrueWeight) + PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2276 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002277 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2278 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2279 }
2280 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002281 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2282 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2283 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2284 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2285 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2286 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2287 SuccTrueWeight) + PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2288 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2289 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2290 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002291 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2292 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2293 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002294 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2295 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2296 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2297
2298 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2299 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2300 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2301 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2302 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002303 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002304 } else {
2305 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2306 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002307 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002308 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
2309 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002310 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002311 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2312 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2313 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2314 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
2315 Instruction *NotCond =
2316 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2317 "not.cond"));
2318 MergedCond =
2319 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2320 NotCond, New,
2321 "and.cond"));
2322 if (PBI_C->isOne())
2323 MergedCond =
2324 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2325 PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond,
2326 "or.cond"));
2327 } else {
2328 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2329 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2330 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002331 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002332 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2333 PBI->getCondition(), New,
2334 "and.cond"));
2335 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
2336 Instruction *NotCond =
2337 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2338 "not.cond"));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002339 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002340 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2341 NotCond, MergedCond,
2342 "or.cond"));
2343 }
2344 }
2345 // Update PHI Node.
2346 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2347 MergedCond);
2348 }
2349 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2350 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2351 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2352 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002353 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002354
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002355 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2356 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2357
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002358 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2359 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I)
2360 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I))
2361 I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002362
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002363 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002364 }
2365 return false;
2366}
2367
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002368// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2369// nullptr.
2370static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2371 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2372 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2373 if (!BB)
2374 continue;
2375 for (auto &I : *BB)
2376 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2377 if (S)
2378 // Multiple stores seen.
2379 return nullptr;
2380 else
2381 S = SI;
2382 }
2383 }
2384 return S;
2385}
2386
2387static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2388 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2389 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2390 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2391 //
2392 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2393 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2394 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2395 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2396 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2397 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2398 // one.
2399 //
2400 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2401 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2402 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2403 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2404 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
2405
2406 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2407 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2408 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2409 if (!AlternativeV)
2410 break;
2411
2412 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2413 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2414 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2415 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2416 break;
2417 PHI = nullptr;
2418 }
2419 if (PHI)
2420 return PHI;
2421
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002422 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002423 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2424 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2425 if (PredBB != BB)
2426 PHI->addIncoming(AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()),
2427 PredBB);
2428 return PHI;
2429}
2430
2431static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2432 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2433 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2434 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2435 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2436 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2437 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2438 };
2439
2440 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2441 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2442 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2443 if (!BB)
2444 return true;
2445 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2446 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2447 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002448 unsigned N = 0;
2449 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2450 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2451 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2452 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2453 ++N;
2454 // Free instructions.
2455 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2456 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2457 continue;
2458 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002459 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002460 }
2461 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002462 };
2463
2464 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively && (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) ||
2465 !IsWorthwhile(PFB) ||
2466 !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2467 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
2468 return false;
2469
2470 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2471 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2472 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2473 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2474 // testing.
2475 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2476 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2477 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2478 return false;
2479
2480 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2481 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2482 return false;
2483
2484 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2485 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2486 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2487 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2488 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2489 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2490 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2491 //
2492 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2493 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2494 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2495 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2496 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2497 return false;
2498 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2499 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2500 return false;
2501 if (QTB)
2502 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2503 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2504 return false;
2505 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2506 I != E; ++I)
2507 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2508 return false;
2509
2510 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2511 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2512 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2513 ->getCondition();
2514 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2515 ->getCondition();
2516
2517 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2518 PStore->getParent());
2519 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2520 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2521
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002522 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2523
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002524 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2525 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2526
2527 if (InvertPCond)
2528 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2529 if (InvertQCond)
2530 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2531 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2532
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002533 auto *T =
2534 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002535 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2536 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2537 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2538 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2539 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2540 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2541
2542 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2543 PStore->eraseFromParent();
2544
2545 return true;
2546}
2547
2548static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2549 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2550 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2551 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2552 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2553 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
2554 // PBI and QBI.
2555 //
2556 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
2557 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
2558 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
2559 // sequences can be if-converted away.
2560 //
2561 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
2562 //
2563 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
2564 // / \ | \
2565 // PTB PFB | PFB
2566 // \ / | /
2567 // QBI QBI
2568 // / \ | \
2569 // QTB QFB | QFB
2570 // \ / | /
2571 // PostBB PostBB
2572 //
2573 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
2574 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
2575 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
2576 //
2577 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
2578 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
2579 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
2580 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
2581 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
2582
2583 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
2584 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
2585 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
2586 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
2587 InvertPCond = true;
2588 }
2589 if (QFB == PostBB) {
2590 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
2591 InvertQCond = true;
2592 }
2593
2594 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
2595 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
2596 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
2597 PTB = nullptr;
2598 if (QTB == PostBB)
2599 QTB = nullptr;
2600
2601 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
2602 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
2603 // predecessor.
2604 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
2605 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P &&
2606 BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
2607 };
2608 if (!PostBB ||
2609 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
2610 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
2611 return false;
2612 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
2613 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
2614 return false;
2615 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
2616 return false;
2617
2618 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
2619 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
2620 SmallPtrSet<Value *,4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
2621 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
2622 if (!BB)
2623 continue;
2624 for (auto &I : *BB)
2625 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2626 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2627 }
2628 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
2629 if (!BB)
2630 continue;
2631 for (auto &I : *BB)
2632 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2633 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2634 }
2635
2636 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
2637 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
2638 // clear what it contains.
2639 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
2640
2641 bool Changed = false;
2642 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
2643 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
2644 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
2645 return Changed;
2646}
2647
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002648/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
2649/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002650/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2651/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002652static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2653 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002654 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2655 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002656
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002657 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002658 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002659 // this conditional branch redundant.
2660 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2661 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2662 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2663 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2664 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2665 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2666 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002667 BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002668 CondIsTrue));
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002669 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2670 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002671
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002672 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2673 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2674 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2675 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002676 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002677 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
2678 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
2679 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002680 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2681 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2682 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002683 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002684 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
2685 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002686 PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional() &&
2687 PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2688 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2689 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002690 NewPN->addIncoming(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002691 CondIsTrue), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002692 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002693 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002694 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002695 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002696
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002697 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002698 return true;
2699 }
2700 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002701
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002702 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2703 if (CE->canTrap())
2704 return false;
2705
Philip Reames846e3e42015-10-29 03:11:49 +00002706 // If BI is reached from the true path of PBI and PBI's condition implies
2707 // BI's condition, we know the direction of the BI branch.
2708 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getParent() &&
Sanjoy Das55ea67c2015-11-06 19:01:08 +00002709 isImpliedCondition(PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL) &&
Philip Reames846e3e42015-10-29 03:11:49 +00002710 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
2711 BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2712 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2713 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
2714 BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext()));
2715 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
2716 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2717 }
2718
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002719 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
2720 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
2721 // merged store at the end.
2722 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
2723 return true;
2724
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002725 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002726 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002727 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002728 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2729 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2730 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2731 ++BBI;
2732 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002733 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002734
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002735 int PBIOp, BIOp;
2736 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2737 PBIOp = BIOp = 0;
2738 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2739 PBIOp = 0, BIOp = 1;
2740 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2741 PBIOp = 1, BIOp = 0;
2742 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2743 PBIOp = BIOp = 1;
2744 else
2745 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002746
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002747 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2748 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2749 // keep getting unwound.
2750 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2751 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002752
2753 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002754 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2755 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002756
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002757 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2758 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2759 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2760
2761 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002762 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2763 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002764 isa<PHINode>(II); ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002765 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2766 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002767
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002768 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2769 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2770 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2771 if (CE->canTrap())
2772 return false;
2773
2774 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2775 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2776 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2777 if (CE->canTrap())
2778 return false;
2779 }
2780
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002781 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002782 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002783
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002784 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002785 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002786
2787
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002788 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2789 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2790 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2791 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2792 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2793 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2794 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2795 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2796 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2797 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002798 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
2799 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002800 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2801 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002802 }
2803
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002804 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002805
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002806 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2807 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002808
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002809 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2810 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002811 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002812 if (PBIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002813 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName()+".not");
2814
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002815 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
2816 if (BIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002817 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName()+".not");
2818
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002819 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002820 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002821
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002822 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
2823 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
2824 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
2825 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002826
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002827 // Update branch weight for PBI.
2828 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002829 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2830 PredFalseWeight);
2831 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2832 SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002833 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2834 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2835 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ?PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2836 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2837 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
2838 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
2839 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
2840 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002841 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
2842 PredOther * SuccCommon,
2843 PredOther * SuccOther};
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002844 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2845 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2846
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002847 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002848 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
2849 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002850 }
2851
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002852 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
2853 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002854 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002855
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002856 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
2857 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
2858 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
2859 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002860 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002861 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2862 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
2863 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2864 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2865 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2866 if (BIV != PBIV) {
2867 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002868 Value *NV = cast<SelectInst>
2869 (Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName()+".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002870 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002871 }
2872 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002873
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002874 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
2875 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002876
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002877 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
2878 // one fewer predecessor.
2879 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002880}
2881
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002882// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
2883// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002884// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
2885// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
2886// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
2887static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002888 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
2889 uint32_t TrueWeight,
2890 uint32_t FalseWeight){
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002891 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
2892 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
2893 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
2894 // successor.
2895 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002896 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002897
2898 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00002899 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002900 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
2901 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002902 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002903 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002904 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002905 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00002906 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
2907 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002908 }
2909
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002910 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
2911 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
2912
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002913 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002914 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002915 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
2916 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
2917 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002918 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002919 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002920 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
2921 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002922 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
2923 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
2924 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2925 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext()).
2926 createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
2927 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002928 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
2929 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
2930 // terminator must be unreachable.
2931 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
2932 } else {
2933 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
2934 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
2935 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002936 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002937 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002938 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002939 else
2940 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002941 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002942 }
2943
2944 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
2945 return true;
2946}
2947
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002948// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002949// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
2950// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
2951// unconditional otherwise.
2952static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
2953 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
2954 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
2955 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
2956 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
2957 return false;
2958
2959 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
2960 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00002961 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
2962 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002963
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002964 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
2965 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
2966 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2967 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2968 if (HasWeights) {
2969 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2970 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2971 TrueWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).
2972 getSuccessorIndex()];
2973 FalseWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).
2974 getSuccessorIndex()];
2975 }
2976 }
2977
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002978 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002979 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB,
2980 TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002981}
2982
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002983// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002984// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
2985// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
2986// with
2987// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
2988static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
2989 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
2990 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
2991 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
2992 if (!TBA || !FBA)
2993 return false;
2994
2995 // Extract the actual blocks.
2996 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
2997 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
2998
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002999 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003000 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB,
3001 0, 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003002}
3003
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003004/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3005/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003006/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3007/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3008/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3009/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3010/// like:
3011///
3012/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3013/// DEFAULT:
3014/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3015/// br label %end
3016/// end:
3017/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003018///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003019/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3020/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003021static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003022 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
3023 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3024 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003025 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003026
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003027 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3028 // complex.
3029 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse()) return false;
3030
3031 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3032 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003033
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003034 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3035 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3036 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3037 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003038 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator())) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003039
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003040 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3041 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3042 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003043
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003044 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3045 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3046 // away.
3047 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3048 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3049 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3050 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003051
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003052 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003053 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003054 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3055 }
3056 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003057 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003058 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003059
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003060 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3061 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3062 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003063 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003064 Value *V;
3065 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3066 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3067 else
3068 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003069
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003070 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3071 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3072 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003073 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003074 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003075
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003076 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3077 // the block.
3078 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003079 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003080 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003081 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3082 return false;
3083
3084 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3085 // true in the PHI.
3086 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
3087 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3088
3089 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3090 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3091
3092 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3093 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3094 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3095 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3096
3097 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3098 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
3099 BasicBlock *NewBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge",
3100 BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003101 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3102 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3103 if (HasWeights) {
3104 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3105 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3106 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
3107 Weights[0] = (Weights[0]+1) >> 1;
3108 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3109
3110 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3111 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3112 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).
3113 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3114 }
3115 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003116 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003117
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003118 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003119 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3120 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3121 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003122 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3123 return true;
3124}
3125
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003126/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003127/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3128/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003129static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3130 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003131 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003132 if (!Cond) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003133
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003134 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3135 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3136 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003137
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003138 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003139 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3140 // Unpack the result
3141 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt*> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
3142 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3143 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3144 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003145
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003146 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003147 if (!CompVal) return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003148
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003149 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3150 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3151 return false;
3152
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003153 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3154
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003155 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3156 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3157 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3158 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003159
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003160 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003161 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003162 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003163
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003164 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3165 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3166
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003167 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3168 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
3169 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3170 if (!TrueWhenEqual) std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003171
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003172 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003173
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003174 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003175 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n" << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003176
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003177 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3178 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3179 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3180 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003181 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3182 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003183 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3184 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003185 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3186
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003187 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003188 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003189 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003190 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003191
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003192 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003193
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003194 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3195 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003196 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003197
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003198 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
3199 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003200 BB = NewBB;
3201 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003202
3203 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003204 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3205 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003206 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3207 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003208 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003209
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003210 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003211 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003212
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003213 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3214 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3215 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003216
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003217 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3218 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3219 // the number of edges added.
3220 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin();
3221 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3222 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3223 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3224 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size()-1; i != e; ++i)
3225 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3226 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003227
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003228 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3229 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003230
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003231 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003232 return true;
3233}
3234
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003235bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
3236 // If this is a trivial landing pad that just continues unwinding the caught
3237 // exception then zap the landing pad, turning its invokes into calls.
3238 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3239 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003240 if (RI->getValue() != LPInst)
3241 // Not a landing pad, or the resume is not unwinding the exception that
3242 // caused control to branch here.
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003243 return false;
3244
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003245 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3246 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003247 while (++I != E)
3248 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3249 return false;
3250
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003251 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003252 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3253 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3254 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003255 }
3256
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003257 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3258 BB->eraseFromParent();
3259 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003260}
3261
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003262bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3263 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3264 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3265 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3266 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3267 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3268 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3269 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3270 // simplified.
3271 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003272 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3273 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003274 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3275 return false;
3276
3277 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003278 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003279 while (++I != E)
3280 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3281 return false;
3282
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003283 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3284 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003285 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003286 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003287
3288 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3289 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3290 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3291 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3292 // are both EH pads).
3293 if (UnwindDest) {
3294 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3295 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003296 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003297 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003298 I != IE; ++I) {
3299 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003300
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003301 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003302 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003303 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003304 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3305 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3306 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3307 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3308 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3309 // pad being removed.
3310 //
3311 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3312 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3313 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3314 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3315 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3316 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3317
3318 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3319 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3320
3321 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3322 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3323 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3324 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003325 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003326 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
3327 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3328 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3329 }
3330 } else {
3331 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3332 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3333 // predecessors with this value.
3334 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3335 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3336 }
3337 }
3338 }
3339
3340 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003341 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003342 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3343 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003344 I != IE;) {
3345 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3346 // being moved to another block.
3347 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3348 if (PN->use_empty())
3349 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3350 // when we erase BB below.
3351 continue;
3352
3353 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3354 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3355 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3356 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3357 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3358 if (pred != BB)
3359 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3360 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3361 }
3362 }
3363
3364 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3365 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3366 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003367 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003368 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003369 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003370 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003371 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003372 }
3373 }
3374
3375 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3376 BB->eraseFromParent();
3377 return true;
3378}
3379
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003380bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003381 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3382 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003383
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003384 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
3385 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
3386 SmallVector<BranchInst*, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00003387 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
3388 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003389 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
3390 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
3391 if (BI->isUnconditional())
3392 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
3393 else
3394 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
3395 }
3396 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003397
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003398 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003399 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003400 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3401 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
3402 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
3403 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003404 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003405 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003406
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003407 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Ramkumar Ramachandra40c3e032015-01-13 03:46:47 +00003408 if (pred_empty(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003409 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3410 BB->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003411
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003412 return true;
3413 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003414
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003415 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
3416 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
3417 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
3418 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3419 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003420
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003421 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3422 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3423 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003424 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003425 return true;
3426 }
3427 return false;
3428}
3429
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003430bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3431 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003432
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003433 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003434
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003435 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3436 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003437 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
3438 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003439 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003440 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3441 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3442 // operations may have this effect.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003443 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003444
3445 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
3446 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
3447 if (SI->isVolatile())
3448 break;
3449 } else if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
3450 if (LI->isVolatile())
3451 break;
3452 } else if (AtomicRMWInst *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
3453 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3454 break;
3455 } else if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
3456 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3457 break;
3458 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3459 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003460 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003461 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003462 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3463 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3464 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3465 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003466 }
3467
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003468 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3469 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3470 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003471 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003472 Changed = true;
3473 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003474
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003475 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3476 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
3477 if (&BB->front() != UI) return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003478
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003479 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
3480 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3481 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003482 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003483 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
3484 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3485 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3486 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3487 TI->eraseFromParent();
3488 Changed = true;
3489 }
3490 } else {
3491 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003492 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003493 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3494 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003495 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003496 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3497 Changed = true;
3498 }
3499 }
3500 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003501 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003502 i != e; ++i)
3503 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003504 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3505 SI->removeCase(i);
3506 --i; --e;
3507 Changed = true;
3508 }
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003509 } else if ((isa<InvokeInst>(TI) &&
3510 cast<InvokeInst>(TI)->getUnwindDest() == BB) ||
David Majnemerbbfc7212015-12-14 18:34:23 +00003511 isa<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003512 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3513 Changed = true;
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003514 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003515 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3516 TI->eraseFromParent();
3517 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003518 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003519 // TODO: We can remove a catchswitch if all it's catchpads end in
3520 // unreachable.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003521 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003522
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003523 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Ramkumar Ramachandra40c3e032015-01-13 03:46:47 +00003524 if (pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003525 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
3526 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3527 BB->eraseFromParent();
3528 return true;
3529 }
3530
3531 return Changed;
3532}
3533
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003534static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3535 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3536
3537 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3538 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3539 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
3540 return false;
3541 }
3542 return true;
3543}
3544
3545/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
3546/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003547static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003548 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003549
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003550 bool HasDefault =
3551 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003552
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003553 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
3554 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
3555 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
3556 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
3557 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
3558
3559 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
3560 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
3561 if (!DestA) DestA = Dest;
3562 if (Dest == DestA) {
3563 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3564 continue;
3565 }
3566 if (!DestB) DestB = Dest;
3567 if (Dest == DestB) {
3568 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3569 continue;
3570 }
3571 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003572 }
3573
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003574 assert(DestA && DestB && "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
3575 assert(DestA != DestB);
3576 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
3577 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
3578 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
3579
3580 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
3581 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
3582 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
3583 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
3584 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
3585 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
3586 ContiguousDest = DestA;
3587 OtherDest = DestB;
3588 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
3589 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
3590 ContiguousDest = DestB;
3591 OtherDest = DestA;
3592 } else
3593 return false;
3594
3595 // Start building the compare and branch.
3596
3597 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
3598 Constant *NumCases = ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003599
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003600 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
3601 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003602 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
3603
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003604 Value *Cmp;
3605 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003606 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003607 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
3608 else
3609 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003610 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003611
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003612 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003613 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
3614 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003615 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3616 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003617 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
3618 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
3619 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3620 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
3621 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
3622 else
3623 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
3624 }
3625 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
3626 TrueWeight /= 2;
3627 FalseWeight /= 2;
3628 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003629 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003630 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(
3631 (uint32_t)TrueWeight, (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003632 }
3633 }
3634
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003635 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
3636 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3637 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
3638 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3639 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003640 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3641 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003642 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3643 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
3644 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3645 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
3646 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3647 }
3648
3649 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003650 SI->eraseFromParent();
3651
3652 return true;
3653}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003654
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003655/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003656/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003657static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
3658 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003659 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003660 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003661 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00003662 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003663
3664 // Gather dead cases.
3665 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 8> DeadCases;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003666 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003667 if ((I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownZero) != 0 ||
3668 (I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownOne) != KnownOne) {
3669 DeadCases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003670 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case '"
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003671 << I.getCaseValue() << "' is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003672 }
3673 }
3674
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003675 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003676 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
3677 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
3678 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003679 bool HasDefault =
3680 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003681 const unsigned NumUnknownBits = Bits -
3682 (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00003683 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00003684 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
3685 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
3686 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003687 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
3688 BasicBlock *NewDefault = SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(),
3689 SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003690 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
3691 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00003692 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
3693 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
3694 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
3695 return true;
3696 }
3697
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003698 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3699 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3700 if (HasWeight) {
3701 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3702 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
3703 }
3704
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003705 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
3706 for (unsigned I = 0, E = DeadCases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003707 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCases[I]);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003708 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003709 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003710 if (HasWeight) {
3711 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
3712 Weights.pop_back();
3713 }
3714
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003715 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003716 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003717 SI->removeCase(Case);
3718 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00003719 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003720 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3721 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3722 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
3723 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3724 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003725
3726 return !DeadCases.empty();
3727}
3728
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003729/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
3730/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003731/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
3732/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
3733/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
3734static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
3735 BasicBlock *BB,
3736 int *PhiIndex) {
3737 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003738 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003739 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003740 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003741
3742 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
3743 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003744 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003745
3746 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
3747
3748 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
3749 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3750 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
3751 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
3752
3753 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3754 if (InValue != CaseValue) continue;
3755
3756 *PhiIndex = Idx;
3757 return PHI;
3758 }
3759
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003760 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003761}
3762
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003763/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
3764/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
3765/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003766/// Returns true if a change is made.
3767static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
3768 typedef DenseMap<PHINode*, SmallVector<int,4> > ForwardingNodesMap;
3769 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
3770
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003771 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003772 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
3773 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003774
3775 int PhiIndex;
3776 PHINode *PHI = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest,
3777 &PhiIndex);
3778 if (!PHI) continue;
3779
3780 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
3781 }
3782
3783 bool Changed = false;
3784
3785 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
3786 E = ForwardingNodes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
3787 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003788 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003789
3790 if (Indexes.size() < 2) continue;
3791
3792 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
3793 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
3794 Changed = true;
3795 }
3796
3797 return Changed;
3798}
3799
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003800/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003801/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00003802static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00003803 if (C->isThreadDependent())
3804 return false;
3805 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
3806 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003807
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00003808 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
3809 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
3810
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003811 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) ||
3812 isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
3813 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) ||
3814 isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
3815 isa<UndefValue>(C);
3816}
3817
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003818/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003819/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003820static Constant *LookupConstant(Value *V,
3821 const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) {
3822 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
3823 return C;
3824 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
3825}
3826
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003827/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003828/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
3829/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003830/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003831static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003832ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
3833 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003834 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003835 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
3836 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003837 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003838 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
3839 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
3840 if (A->isNullValue())
3841 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003842 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003843 }
3844
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003845 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
3846 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
3847 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
3848 COps.push_back(A);
3849 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003850 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003851 }
3852
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003853 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003854 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
3855 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003856 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003857
3858 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I->getOpcode(), I->getType(), COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003859}
3860
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003861/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003862/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003863/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003864/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003865static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003866GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003867 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003868 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
3869 const DataLayout &DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003870 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
3871 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
3872
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003873 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
3874 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
3875 SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*> ConstantPool;
3876 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
3877 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
3878 ++I) {
3879 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
3880 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
3881 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
3882 return false;
3883 Pred = CaseDest;
3884 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
3885 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3886 // Skip debug intrinsic.
3887 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003888 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003889 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00003890
3891 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
3892 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
3893 // no longer dominate all its uses.
3894 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
3895 User *User = Use.getUser();
3896 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
3897 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
3898 continue;
3899 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
3900 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
3901 continue;
3902 return false;
3903 }
3904
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003905 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003906 } else {
3907 break;
3908 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003909 }
3910
3911 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
3912 if (!*CommonDest)
3913 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
3914 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
3915 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
3916 return false;
3917
3918 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
3919 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
3920 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3921 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
3922 if (Idx == -1)
3923 continue;
3924
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003925 Constant *ConstVal = LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx),
3926 ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003927 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003928 return false;
3929
3930 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
3931 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
3932 return false;
3933
3934 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
3935 }
3936
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003937 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003938}
3939
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003940// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
3941// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003942static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
3943 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
3944 Constant *Result) {
3945 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
3946 if (I.first == Result) {
3947 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
3948 return;
3949 }
3950 }
3951 UniqueResults.push_back(std::make_pair(Result,
3952 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
3953}
3954
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003955// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003956// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
3957// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
3958// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003959static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
3960 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
3961 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
3962 Constant *&DefaultResult,
3963 const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003964 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
3965 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
3966
3967 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
3968 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
3969 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
3970 DL))
3971 return false;
3972
3973 // Only one value per case is permitted
3974 if (Results.size() > 1)
3975 return false;
3976 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
3977
3978 // Check the PHI consistency.
3979 if (!PHI)
3980 PHI = Results[0].first;
3981 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
3982 return false;
3983 }
3984 // Find the default result value.
3985 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
3986 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
3987 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
3988 DL);
3989 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
3990 // is unreachable.
3991 DefaultResult =
3992 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
3993 if ((!DefaultResult &&
3994 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
3995 return false;
3996
3997 return true;
3998}
3999
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004000// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4001// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004002// Example:
4003// switch (a) {
4004// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4005// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4006// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4007// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4008// default:
4009// return 4;
4010// }
4011static Value *
4012ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4013 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4014 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4015 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
4016 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
4017 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4018 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4019 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4020 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4021 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4022 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4023
4024 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4025 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4026 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4027 Value *const ValueCompare =
4028 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4029 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4030 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4031 }
4032 Value *const ValueCompare =
4033 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4034 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first, SelectValue,
4035 "switch.select");
4036 }
4037
4038 return nullptr;
4039}
4040
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004041// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4042// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004043static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4044 Value *SelectValue,
4045 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4046 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4047 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4048 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4049 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4050
4051 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4052
4053 // Remove the switch.
4054 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4055 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4056
4057 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4058 continue;
4059 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4060 }
4061 SI->eraseFromParent();
4062}
4063
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004064/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004065/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4066/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4067static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004068 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004069 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4070 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4071 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4072 Constant *DefaultResult;
4073 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4074 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004075 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
4076 DL))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004077 return false;
4078 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4079 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4080 return false;
4081 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4082
4083 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
4084 Value *SelectValue = ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(
4085 UniqueResults,
4086 DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
4087 if (SelectValue) {
4088 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4089 return true;
4090 }
4091 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4092 return false;
4093}
4094
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004095namespace {
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004096 /// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004097 class SwitchLookupTable {
4098 public:
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004099 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4100 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004101 SwitchLookupTable(
4102 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4103 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4104 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004105
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004106 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004107 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004108 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004109
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004110 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004111 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004112 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004113 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004114
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004115 private:
4116 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4117 // different ways.
4118 enum {
4119 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4120 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4121 SingleValueKind,
4122
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004123 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4124 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4125 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4126 LinearMapKind,
4127
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004128 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4129 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4130 // shift and mask operations.
4131 BitMapKind,
4132
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004133 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4134 // instructions from the table.
4135 ArrayKind
4136 } Kind;
4137
4138 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4139 Constant *SingleValue;
4140
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004141 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4142 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4143 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
4144
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004145 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4146 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4147 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
4148
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004149 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4150 GlobalVariable *Array;
4151 };
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +00004152}
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004153
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004154SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4155 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4156 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4157 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004158 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004159 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004160 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4161 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004162
4163 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004164 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004165
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004166 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4167
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004168 // Build up the table contents.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004169 SmallVector<Constant*, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
4170 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4171 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4172 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004173 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004174
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004175 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue())
4176 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004177 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4178
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004179 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004180 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004181 }
4182
4183 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004184 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004185 assert(DefaultValue &&
4186 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004187 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004188 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4189 if (!TableContents[I])
4190 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004191 }
4192
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004193 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004194 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004195 }
4196
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004197 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4198 // that single value.
4199 if (SingleValue) {
4200 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4201 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004202 }
4203
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004204 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4205 // table index.
4206 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4207 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4208 APInt PrevVal;
4209 APInt DistToPrev;
4210 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4211 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4212 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4213 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4214 if (!ConstVal) {
4215 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4216 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4217 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4218 break;
4219 }
4220 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4221 if (I != 0) {
4222 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4223 if (I == 1) {
4224 DistToPrev = Dist;
4225 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4226 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4227 break;
4228 }
4229 }
4230 PrevVal = Val;
4231 }
4232 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4233 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4234 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4235 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4236 ++NumLinearMaps;
4237 return;
4238 }
4239 }
4240
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004241 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004242 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004243 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004244 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4245 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4246 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004247 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4248 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4249 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4250 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4251 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004252 }
4253 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4254 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4255 Kind = BitMapKind;
4256 ++NumBitMaps;
4257 return;
4258 }
4259
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004260 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004261 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004262 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4263
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004264 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/ true,
4265 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage,
4266 Initializer,
4267 "switch.table");
4268 Array->setUnnamedAddr(true);
4269 Kind = ArrayKind;
4270}
4271
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004272Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004273 switch (Kind) {
4274 case SingleValueKind:
4275 return SingleValue;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004276 case LinearMapKind: {
4277 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4278 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4279 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4280 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4281 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4282 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4283 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4284 return Result;
4285 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004286 case BitMapKind: {
4287 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4288 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
4289
4290 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4291 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4292 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +00004293 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004294
4295 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4296 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(ShiftAmt,
4297 ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4298 "switch.shiftamt");
4299
4300 // Shift down.
4301 Value *DownShifted = Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt,
4302 "switch.downshift");
4303 // Mask off.
4304 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy,
4305 "switch.masked");
4306 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004307 case ArrayKind: {
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004308 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004309 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4310 uint64_t TableSize = Array->getInitializer()->getType()
4311 ->getArrayNumElements();
4312 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4313 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(Index,
4314 IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(),
4315 IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4316 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004317
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004318 Value *GEPIndices[] = { Builder.getInt32(0), Index };
David Blaikieaa41cd52015-04-03 21:33:42 +00004319 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
4320 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004321 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
4322 }
4323 }
4324 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
4325}
4326
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004327bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004328 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004329 Type *ElementType) {
4330 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004331 if (!IT)
4332 return false;
4333 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
4334 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004335
4336 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
4337 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX/IT->getBitWidth())
4338 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004339 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004340}
4341
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004342/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
4343/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004344static bool
4345ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
4346 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
4347 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004348 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
4349 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004350
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004351 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004352 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004353 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
4354 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004355
4356 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004357 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004358
4359 // Saturate this flag to false.
4360 AllTablesFitInRegister = AllTablesFitInRegister &&
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004361 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004362
4363 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
4364 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
4365 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
4366 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004367 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004368 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004369
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004370 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
4371 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
4372 return true;
4373
4374 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
4375 if (HasIllegalType)
4376 return false;
4377
4378 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
4379 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
4380 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
4381 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004382}
4383
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004384/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
4385/// \code
4386/// if (idx < tablesize)
4387/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
4388/// else
4389/// r = default_value;
4390/// if (r != default_value)
4391/// ...
4392/// \endcode
4393/// Is optimized to:
4394/// \code
4395/// cond = idx < tablesize;
4396/// if (cond)
4397/// r = table[idx];
4398/// else
4399/// r = default_value;
4400/// if (cond)
4401/// ...
4402/// \endcode
4403/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
4404static void reuseTableCompare(User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock,
4405 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch, Constant *DefaultValue,
4406 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values) {
4407
4408 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
4409 if (!CmpInst)
4410 return;
4411
4412 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
4413 // threading can do its work afterwards.
4414 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
4415 return;
4416
4417 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
4418 if (!CmpOp1)
4419 return;
4420
4421 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
4422 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
4423 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
4424
4425 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
4426 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4427 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
4428 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
4429 return;
4430
4431 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4432 // compare result.
4433 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4434 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4435 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
4436 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4437 return;
4438 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4439 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4440 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00004441
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004442 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4443 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4444 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4445 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4446 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4447 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4448 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4449 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4450 return;
4451 }
4452
4453 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4454 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4455 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4456 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4457 } else {
4458 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
4459 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(RangeCmp,
4460 ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4461 RangeCheckBranch);
4462 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4463 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4464 }
4465}
4466
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004467/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
4468/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
4469/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004470static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4471 const DataLayout &DL,
4472 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004473 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004474
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004475 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004476 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004477 return false;
4478
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004479 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4480 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4481
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004482 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4483 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4484 // string and lookup indices into that.
4485
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004486 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make them
4487 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4488 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004489 return false;
4490
4491 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00004492 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004493 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4494 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4495 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4496 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4497
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004498 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004499 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*>, 4> ResultListTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004500 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4501 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Constant*> DefaultResults;
4502 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*> ResultTypes;
4503 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
4504
4505 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4506 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4507 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4508 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4509 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4510 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4511
4512 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4513 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> ResultsTy;
4514 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004515 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004516 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004517 return false;
4518
4519 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004520 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4521 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4522 Constant *Value = I.second;
4523 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4524 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
4525 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004526 }
4527 }
4528
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004529 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004530 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004531 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
4532 }
4533
4534 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
4535 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
4536 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
4537 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
4538
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004539 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
4540 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004541 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004542 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004543 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004544
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004545 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
4546 if (NeedMask) {
4547 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
4548 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
4549 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004550 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004551 return false;
4552 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004553
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004554 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
4555 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4556 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004557 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004558 }
4559
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004560 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004561 return false;
4562
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004563 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004564 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004565 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4566 "switch.lookup",
4567 CommonDest->getParent(),
4568 CommonDest);
4569
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004570 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004571 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
4572 Value *TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
4573 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004574
4575 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
4576 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004577 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004578 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004579 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
4580 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
4581 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
4582
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004583 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
4584 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
4585 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
4586 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
4587 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4588 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004589 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
4590
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004591 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004592 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004593 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
4594 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004595 } else {
4596 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004597 MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004598 RangeCheckBranch = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004599 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004600
4601 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
4602 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004603
4604 if (NeedMask) {
4605 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
4606 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
4607 // and we create a new LookupBB.
4608 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
4609 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
4610 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4611 "switch.lookup",
4612 CommonDest->getParent(),
4613 CommonDest);
4614
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00004615 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
4616 // unnecessary illegal types.
4617 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
4618 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
4619 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004620 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004621 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
4622 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4623 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() -
4624 MinCaseVal->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
4625 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
4626 }
4627 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
4628
4629 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
4630 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
4631 // else continue with table lookup.
4632 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
4633 Value *MaskIndex = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy,
4634 "switch.maskindex");
4635 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex,
4636 "switch.shifted");
4637 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(Shifted,
4638 Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()),
4639 "switch.lobit");
4640 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
4641
4642 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
4643 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
4644 }
4645
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00004646 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
4647 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
4648 // do not delete PHINodes here.
4649 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
4650 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
4651 }
4652
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004653 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004654 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4655 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004656 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004657
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004658 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
4659 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004660 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004661
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004662 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004663
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004664 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
4665 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004666 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
4667 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004668 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
4669 ReturnedEarly = true;
4670 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004671 }
4672
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004673 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
4674 // possible.
4675 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
4676 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
4677 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
4678 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
4679 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
4680 }
4681 }
4682
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004683 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004684 }
4685
4686 if (!ReturnedEarly)
4687 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
4688
4689 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004690 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004691 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004692
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004693 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004694 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004695 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4696 }
4697 SI->eraseFromParent();
4698
4699 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004700 if (NeedMask)
4701 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004702 return true;
4703}
4704
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004705bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004706 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
4707
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004708 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
4709 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4710 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
4711 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
4712 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004713 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004714
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004715 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
4716 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
4717 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004718 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004719
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004720 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
4721 // away into any preds.
4722 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
4723 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4724 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4725 ++BBI;
4726 if (SI == &*BBI)
4727 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004728 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004729 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004730
4731 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004732 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004733 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004734
4735 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004736 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
4737 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004738
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004739 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL))
4740 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004741
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004742 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004743 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004744
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004745 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
4746 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004747
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004748 return false;
4749}
4750
4751bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
4752 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
4753 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004754
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004755 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
4756 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
4757 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
4758 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00004759 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004760 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
4761 IBI->removeDestination(i);
4762 --i; --e;
4763 Changed = true;
4764 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004765 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004766
4767 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
4768 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
4769 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
4770 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4771 return true;
4772 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004773
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004774 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
4775 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
4776 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
4777 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4778 return true;
4779 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004780
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004781 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
4782 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004783 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004784 }
4785 return Changed;
4786}
4787
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00004788/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
4789/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
4790/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
4791/// a shared handler.
4792///
4793/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
4794/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
4795/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
4796/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
4797/// sinking in this file)
4798///
4799/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
4800/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
4801/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
4802/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
4803/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
4804/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
4805///
4806/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
4807/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
4808/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
4809static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
4810 BasicBlock *BB) {
4811 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
4812 assert(Succ);
4813 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
4814 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
4815 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
4816 return false;
4817
4818 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
4819 if (BB == OtherPred)
4820 continue;
4821 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
4822 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
4823 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
4824 continue;
4825 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {}
4826 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
4827 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
4828 continue;
4829
4830 // We've found an identical block. Update our predeccessors to take that
4831 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
4832 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
4833 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
4834 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
4835 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
4836 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB &&
4837 II->getUnwindDest() == BB && "unexpected successor");
4838 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
4839 }
4840
4841 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
4842 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
4843 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end();
4844 I != E;) {
4845 Instruction &Inst = *I; I++;
4846 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
4847 Inst.eraseFromParent();
4848 }
4849
4850 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
4851 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
4852 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
4853 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
4854 }
4855
4856 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
4857 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
4858 BI->eraseFromParent();
4859 return true;
4860 }
4861 return false;
4862}
4863
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00004864bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder){
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004865 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004866
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00004867 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
4868 return true;
4869
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004870 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004871 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004872 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
4873 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
4874 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004875
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004876 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
4877 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
4878 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
4879 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
4880 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
4881 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00004882 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004883 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
4884 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004885 return true;
4886 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004887
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00004888 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
4889 // equivalent.
4890 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
4891 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {}
4892 if (I->isTerminator() &&
4893 TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
4894 return true;
4895 }
4896
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00004897 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4898 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
4899 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
4900 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004901 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
4902 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004903 return false;
4904}
4905
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00004906static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
4907 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
4908 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
4909 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
4910 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
4911 return nullptr;
4912 PredPred = PPred;
4913 }
4914 return PredPred;
4915}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004916
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004917bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004918 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004919
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004920 // Conditional branch
4921 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
4922 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4923 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
4924 // switch.
4925 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004926 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004927 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004928
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004929 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
4930 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4931 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
4932 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4933 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4934 ++I;
4935 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004936 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004937 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004938 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())){
4939 ++I;
4940 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4941 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4942 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004943 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004944 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004945 }
4946 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004947
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004948 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004949 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004950 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004951
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00004952 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4953 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
4954 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004955 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
4956 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004957
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004958 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
4959 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
4960 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
4961 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004962 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
4963 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004964 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
4965 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004966 } else {
4967 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004968 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004969 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
4970 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4971 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004972 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
4973 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004974 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004975 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004976 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004977 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004978 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
4979 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4980 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004981 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
4982 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004983 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004984
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004985 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
4986 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
4987 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
4988 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004989 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004990 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004991
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004992 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004993 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
4994 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004995 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00004996 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004997 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004998
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00004999 // Look for diamond patterns.
5000 if (MergeCondStores)
5001 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5002 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5003 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5004 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
5005 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5006
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005007 return false;
5008}
5009
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005010/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5011static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5012 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5013 if (!C)
5014 return false;
5015
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005016 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005017 return false;
5018
5019 if (C->isNullValue()) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005020 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005021 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005022
5023 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5024 // control flow (eg. calls)
5025 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005026 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005027 return false;
5028
5029 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5030 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5031 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5032 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5033
5034 // Look through bitcasts.
5035 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5036 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5037
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005038 // Load from null is undefined.
5039 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005040 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5041 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005042
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005043 // Store to null is undefined.
5044 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005045 if (!SI->isVolatile())
5046 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 && SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005047 }
5048 return false;
5049}
5050
5051/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005052/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005053static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5054 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5055 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5056 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5057 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5058 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5059 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5060 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5061 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5062 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5063 // destination from conditional branches.
5064 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5065 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5066 else
5067 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1) :
5068 BI->getSuccessor(0));
5069 BI->eraseFromParent();
5070 return true;
5071 }
5072 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5073 }
5074
5075 return false;
5076}
5077
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005078bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005079 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005080
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005081 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005082 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005083
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005084 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5085 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Ramkumar Ramachandra181233b2015-01-13 04:17:47 +00005086 if ((pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005087 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005088 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00005089 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
Chris Lattner7eb270e2008-12-03 06:40:52 +00005090 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005091 return true;
5092 }
5093
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005094 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5095 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005096 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005097
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005098 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5099 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5100
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005101 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5102 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5103
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005104 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5105 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5106 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5107 //
5108 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5109 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005110
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005111 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5112
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005113 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5114 // eliminate it, do so now.
5115 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5116 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005117 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005118
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005119 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005120 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005121 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00005122 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005123 } else {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005124 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005125 }
5126 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00005127 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder)) return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005128 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5129 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder)) return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005130 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
5131 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5132 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005133 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005134 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005135 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
5136 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5137 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005138 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
5139 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5140 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI)) return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005141 }
5142
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005143 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005144}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005145
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005146/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5147/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005148/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5149/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5150///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005151bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005152 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC) {
5153 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
5154 BonusInstThreshold, AC).run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005155}